Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A2020 Manual de usuario

English

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

PREPARATIONS 17

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting a device that supports SCENE link playback (remote connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 50

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

PLAYBACK 60

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD/CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

En 3

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 90

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

CONFIGURATIONS 103

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 131

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 132

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

En 4

APPENDIX 145

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

Accessories En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (x4)

 AM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Microphone base

(RX-A3020 only)

*Using for angle measurement

during YPAO.

 Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies

depending on the region of purchase.

 CD-ROM

(Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right way

round.

*RX-A3020: AAA, LR03, UM-4

RX-A2020: AAA, R03, UM-4

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-A3020

(U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”

and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

The unit’s

remote control

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.158

Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence) speaker

system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows

you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.50

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.64

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.68

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.24

Operating external

devices with the supplied

remote control

. p.136

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.76

•USB

. p.80

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.83

• Internet radio

. p.86

•AirPlay

. p.88

3D and 4K signals supported

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.61

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.41)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.35)

When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.69)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.68)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays

back the selected source with the least circuitry, which

lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

❑ Easy operation with a TV screen

You can navigate through different types of content

(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or

easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.

❑ Low power consumption

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption (p.130).

❑ Backlight illumination

remote control

The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate

the remote control even in a dark home theater room.

BD/DVD

player

Game

console

Camcorder

Turntable

CD player

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.101).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.118).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.122).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian and Chinese (p.49).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.135). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.144).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following

pages.

• Input settings (p.103)

• Scene settings (p.106)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings

(p.109)

• Various function settings (p.112)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.131)

• System settings (p.133)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 8

The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these

experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and

this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not

only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as

the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been

reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The

character of the reflected and reverberant sound is

affected by the shape, size, and material of the building,

and all of these sounds taken together are what give us

the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is

what we call the “sound field”.

Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of

acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of

concert halls and performance spaces around the

world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to

create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of

sound programs using CINEMA DSP.

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the

content of the playback source such as movies, music,

or games, you can maximize the acoustical

effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a

sound program designed for movies can give you the

sensation of actually being in that scene.)

In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses

3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of

height, generating an even more realistic sound field

with a spatial sense.

CINEMA DSP HD

“CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field

playback technology that takes full advantage of the

massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the

sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker

output, it delivers more than twice as much capability for

generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA

DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability,

delivering an utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.

Capability for reproducing reflections

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)

CINEMA DSP

CINEMA DSP HD³

Level

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze

the environment so that this information can be used to

automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and

the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the

content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes

the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating

technology for your specific listening environment.

YPAO-R.S.C.

In rooms that have not been designed or constructed

with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or

ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred

low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical

image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only

the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in

a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and

inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to

speaker placement, thus creating a listening

environment comparable to that of a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

Angle measurement

The direction (angle) of the front

speakers, surround speakers,

and presence speakers as seen

from the listening position is

measured, and compensation

is applied to the sound field in

order to maximize the

effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field.

Optimizing speaker settings

for the environment (YPAO)

Compensation

Time

Level

Microphone base

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 9

High-resolution music enhancer

Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can

be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a

CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening

of the musicality in the original content (p.101)

Before processing

After processing

High-quality video processing

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc)

images, any content can be played back as a

high-quality image (p.119).

• High-performance I/P conversion, high-performance

scaling

• Powerful noise reduction

• Resolution enhancement adds more detail

The RX-A3020 can also apply fine touches such as

noise reduction and resolution enhancement.

Unrivaled audio and video quality

Frequency

Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz

signal (such as a CD)

Frequency

Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a

88.2/96 kHz signal

Support for bi-amp connections and

external power amp expansion

To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front

speakers that support power amp expansion, or

expand your system by adding an external power amp

(such as a Hi-Fi amp).

For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration”

(p.24).

The best expandability in Yamaha

By connecting an external power amp,

you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP

- an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.

(Example)

Multi-zone function

The multi-zone function (p.90) allows you to play back

different input sources in the room where the unit is

installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

(The following shows examples of use.)

Enjoying music using speakers in another room

While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living

room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a

different room.

Enjoying videos using a TV in

another room (HDMI connection)

While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living

room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via

HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Expandable to meet diverse needs

External power amp

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Kitchen

(such as Zone4)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.122)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.123)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.124)

• An iPod is being charged (p.76)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.12).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.68).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.11)

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

USB

YPAO MIC

PHONES

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

SCENE

1234

RLAUDIO

HDMI IN

OPTICAL

INFO

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

4 5231

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.98).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.97).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.99).

Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or

Zone3 (p.96).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.67).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.63).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.61).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2–4 (ZONE 4: RX-A3020 only)

Enables/disables the audio output to

each zone (p.95).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by

the keys and knobs on the front panel

(p.95).

H INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.97).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.70).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.69).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.69).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.80) or an iPod

(p.76).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.50).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game

consoles (p.44).

ENTER

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

USB

YPAO MIC

PHONES

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

SCENE

123 4

RLAUDIO

HDMI IN

OPTICAL

INFO

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

BE JL9ACD HIK0FG

MNO P

(RX-A3020)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

(U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station

signal.

3 ZONE indicators

Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 (RX-A3020 only) is

enabled (p.95).

4 PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.96)

5 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.97).

6 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

7 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

8 ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.99) is working.

9 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) is

working.

0 CINEMA DSP indicator

(RX-A3020)

“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is

working. “CINEMA DSP ! ” lights up when CINEMA DSP

HD³ is activated.

(RX-A2020)

“CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is

working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D

is activated.

A SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

B Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

C Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

Z Front/rear presence speakers (L)

X Front/rear presence speakers (R)

C Subwoofer (1)

V Subwoofer (2)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED PARTY

ZONE

09 BCB

3 4

(RX-A3020 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.43).

2 DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

3 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.45).

4 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.41).

5 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.46).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(composite video/S-video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or

S-video and outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting

to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.92).

7 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.35). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (RX-A3020)

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.40), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.93).

HDMI OUT 2 jack (RX-A2020)

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.40).

9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.41).

0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.41).

A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video)

jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting to a zone

video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.92).

B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to a Yamaha product that supports SCENE

link playback (p.47) or for connecting to an infrared signal

receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other

devices from another room (p.94).

C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.47).

D RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

E VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.48).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.P R ESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

21 3 7 8 D5 6 CA B904

* The area around the video/audio output

jacks is marked in white on the actual

product to prevent improper connections.

(RX-A3020 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 14

F ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.44).

G AUDIO 1–4 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.43).

H MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel

output and inputting audio signals (p.46).

I ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3020)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or

Zone3 and outputting audio (p.91), or for connecting to an

external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence

channels (p.33).

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2020)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or

Zone3 and outputting audio (p.91).

J PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.22) or

to an external power amplifier (p.33).

K SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.18).

L AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.48).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.P R ESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

K LGF I JH

* The area around the video/audio output

jacks is marked in white on the actual

product to prevent improper connections.

(RX-A3020 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 15

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE/RECEIVER key

Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is

operated with the remote control (p.138). You can operate

the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external

device when this key lights up in green.

RECEIVER z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Display window

Displays remote control information.

4 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

TUNER FM/AM radio

[A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the

remote control without switching the input

source.

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.61).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.63).

7 External device operation keys

Let you play back and perform other operations for external

devices (p.138).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.78).

(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program

(p.71).

A PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70).

B TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.137).

C VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

D MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

E OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.98).

F LIGHT key (RX-A3020 only)

Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10

seconds.

G DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.97).

H Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.63).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-AUX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP M ENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

(RX-A3020)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 16

■ Inside of the remote control cover

I Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.63).

J INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.97).

K Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

L ZONE key

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control

(p.95).

M PA RT Y k ey

Turns on/off the party mode (p.96).

N HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.60).

O Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio (p.69).

MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.

FM Switches to FM radio.

AM Switches to AM radio.

TUN./CH Select the radio frequency.

P SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

off).

Q LEVEL key

Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.117).

R SETUP key

Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.136).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.136).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-AUX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP M ENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PA RT Y

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

(RX-A3020)

PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 17

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.18)

Basic speaker configuration (p.19)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.24)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.35)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.41)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.44)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

5 Connecting to a network (p.45)

Connect the unit to a network.

6 Connecting other devices (p.46)

Connect external devices such as recording devices.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.48)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language

(p.49)

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.50)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18

The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.24).

Functions of each speaker

• We recommend using presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However,

the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce

3-dimensional sound fields even when no presence speakers are connected (p.64).

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.21).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and

vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers

also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround

back speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround back (L) 6

Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.

Surround back (R) 7

Front presence (L) E

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA

DSP HD³ (RX-A3020) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2020) (p.64), the

presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in

your room.

Front presence (R) R

Rear presence (L) T

Rear presence (R) Y

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and

reinforces bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to

the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the

room.

T Y

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 9.2+2-channel system

(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.64).

• (RX-A3020 only)

You can make an 11-channel system by using an external power amplifier (p.25).

❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a

highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds

using the surround back speakers.

6 7

T Y

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20

❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying

5.1-channel contents.

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear

presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back

speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,

configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.33).

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.114)

9+2 9 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●●

Center 3 ●●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●●●

Surround (R) 5 ●●●●

Surround back (L) 6 ● c*1 c*3

Surround back (R) 7 ● c*1 c*3

Front presence (L) E ●●c*4

Front presence (R) R ●●c*4

Rear presence (L) T ● c*2

Rear presence (R) Y ● c*2

–

UC U

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

UO3

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

6 7

The unit (rear)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

FRONT

(

REAR

)

SUBWOOFER

(

FRONT

)

Audio pin cable

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.19), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi

amplifier, etc.) to build an

extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 25

■ Available speaker configurations

(RX-A3020)

(RX-A2020)

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114)

in the “Setup” menu.

• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to

the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based

on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

Speaker configuration

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.114) Page

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External power

amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7 c 7ch BI-AMP 26

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel

expansion (for presence channels)

9 c Front presence 7ch BI-AMP +FP 26

11 c

Front presence

Rear presence

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP 27

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence

channels)

11 Rear Presence 9ch +RP 27

11 Front 9ch +FRONT 28

Front presence

Rear presence

7ch +FP+RP 28

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and

multi-zone speakers

9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 29

7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 29

Using multi-zone speakers

7 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 30

9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 30

7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 31

Speaker configuration

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.114) Page

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External power

amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7 c 7ch BI-AMP 26

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and

multi-zone speakers

9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 29

7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 29

Using multi-zone speakers

7 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 30

9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 30

7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 31

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 26

❑ 7ch BI-AMP ❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP (RX-A3020 only)

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Bi-amp

via external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone2 (p.91).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 27

❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-A3020 only) ❑ 9ch +RP (RX-A3020 only)

6 7

Bi-amp

via external amp

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting

external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.91).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

6 7

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone3 (p.91).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 28

❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3020 only) ❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3020 only)

6 7

via external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone3 (p.91).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY EXTRA SP 2

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

6 7

via external amp

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting

external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.91).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 29

❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE ❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

via external amp

Main zone

Zone3

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Zone2

Zone3

Main zone

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 30

❑ 7ch +1ZONE ❑ 9ch +1ZONE

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Main zone

Zone3

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.95), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 31

❑ 7ch +2ZONE

Zone2

Zone3

Main zone

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.95), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 32

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114) in the

“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign”

(p.114) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is

assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks.

• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.91).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12 12

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2 Zone3

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 33

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3020 only)

Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power

Amp Assign” setting (p.114).

2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3020 only)

Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power

Amp Assign” setting (p.114).

3 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

4 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

5 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

6 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 Ω)

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

HDMI

DVD)

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

AC IN

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

321 4 56

The unit (rear)

4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

PB PR

ONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S2000)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 34

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ S VIDEO jack

Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)

and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video

cable.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable.

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

COMPONEN

AV 1

Component video cable

S-video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 35

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks

available on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

■

Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.122) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.156).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).

2 Connecting a TV

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback

devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the

unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.158).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a

TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Does your TV support

Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Does your TV support

HDMI Control?

Does your TV have an

HDMI input jack?

■ Connection Method 3 (p.38)

■ Connection Method 2 (p.37)

■ Connection Method 1 (p.35)

■ Connection Method 4 (p.39)

Yes

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDI O 3AUDIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT 1 jack

HDMI input

(ARC-compatible)

The unit (rear)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 36

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)

and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

c Press ON SCREEN.

d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

h Press ON SCREEN.

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set

to “On”.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio

cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.37).

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

RETURN DISPLAY

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 37

■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.122) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.156).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and

playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

RETURN DISPLAY

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 38

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.156).

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 39

■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following

connections.

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog

Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.156).

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.61), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

V OUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP2

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

SURROU

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

S VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDI O 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

SURROU

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 40

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.60).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• (RX-A3020 only)

If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video

monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor

(p.93).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 41

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.76)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.80)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.127) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,

D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.101) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRI

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

UDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

RROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

12V

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital optical AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OU

AUDI O 3AUDI O 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

YPB PR

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 42

■ S-video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

S-video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(S VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(S-video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 43

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.127) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL

(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.101) in the “Option” menu.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital optical

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

Digital coaxial

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 44

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect devices such as game consoles and

camcorders to the unit.

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on

the unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on

the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the

unit.

• You need to prepare a cable that match the output jacks on your device.

• If you connect video devices to both the HDMI IN jack and analog video/audio jacks, the unit outputs

video/audio input through the HDMI IN jack.

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output

from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT jacks.

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

USB

YPAO MIC

PHONES

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

RL AUDIO

HDMI IN

OPTICAL

FM AM

TUNING

V RL

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

• The supplied antennas and the location of the antenna jacks vary depending on the region of

purchase.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SU

EXTRA SP2

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

FM/AM antenna connections

5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 45

Assembling the AM antenna

(U.S.A. model)

(Other models)

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.123).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Hold down Insert Release

5 Connecting to a network

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV

YPB PR

B PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDI O 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESEN

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

1 2 3 4

FM/AM antenna connections

Network connections

6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 46

Connecting recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output video/audio signals selected as the input.

• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output

You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an

SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,

the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using

“Video Out” (p.104) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.

• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing

speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker

configuration.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are

not available.

6 Connecting other devices

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDI O 3AUDI O 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

SURROU

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

AV OUT

The unit (rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video/audio

recording device

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB P

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO 3AUDI O 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZON

F.P RE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

NNA

adio

(4 RADIO)

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

The unit (rear)

MULTI CH

INPUT jacks

Channel output

(Center)

Device with analog

multi-channel output

(Subwoofer)

(Surround

back)

(Surround)

(Front)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 47

Connecting a device that supports

SCENE link playback (remote connection)

If you have a Yamaha product that supports SCENE control signal transmission, you

can operate it remotely by connecting it to one of the REMOTE OUT jacks, using a

monaural mini-jack cable, and linking with the SCENE function (p.61).

• If you connect a Yamaha product that supports the SCENE link playback function to one of the REMOTE

OUT jacks, you can remotely start playback on it by linking with a scene selection (p.61). To enable the

SCENE link playback function, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.106) in the “Scene” menu.

• You can also connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate the unit and external devices from

another room (p.94).

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.128) in the

“Setup” menu.

HDMI

V 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

NGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXT

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

REMOTE

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE OUT jack

Yamaha product

(such as a DVD player)

Remote input

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

E) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

12V 0.1A

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System connection

input

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

1 2 3 4 5 6

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 48

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

7 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

IN OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ESENCE

RE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

12V 0.1A

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V-

240V

110V-

120V

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

E) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

12V 0.1A

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Power cable connection

8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 49

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,

Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Language setting

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ON SCREEN ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 50

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that

the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function

at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

According to your speaker configuration, configure

the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114) in the

“Setup” menu.

For the basic speaker configuration (p.19): set to “Basic”

(default).

For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.24): set

to the appropriate setting.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position (same height as your ears) and connect it

to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at

your listening position (same height

as your ears). We recommend the

use of a tripod as a microphone

stand. You can use the tripod

screws to stabilize the microphone.

(The microphone direction is not

considered.)

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 51

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, select the measuring options.

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.51) or “Angle”

(p.52) (RX-A3020 only) and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.54)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.52)

❑ Multi Position

Selects multi measure or single measure.

Settings

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions

in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to

suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 52

❑ Angle

(RX-A3020 only)

Enables/disables the angle measurement.

Settings

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process (about 5 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.58) or “Warning messages” (p.59).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

(RX-A2020)

(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 3.

Yes

Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure

angle of each speaker at the listening position and

correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP

can create more effective sound fields.

No (default) Disables the angle measurement.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 53

(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 2.

Perform the angle measurement.

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.

b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and

set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement

finishes.

c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle

measurement finishes.

d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.

The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle

measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.56).

FRONT

DIRECTION

Microphone

base

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 54

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.58) or “Warning messages” (p.59).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 55

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

(RX-A2020)

(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 5.

(RX-A3020 [when angle measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 4.

Perform the angle measurement.

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.

b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you

will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to

the position “1”.

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement

finishes.

c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle

measurement finishes.

FRONT

DIRECTION

Microphone

base

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 56

d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.

The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle

measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.56).

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 57

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.111).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the

correct polarity (+/-).

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

Angle

(RX-A3020 only)

Angle of each speaker at the listening position

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ON SCREEN ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 58

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 59

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.56) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.56) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80

ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the

subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as

possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 60

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.69)

• Playing back iPod music (p.76)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.80)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.83)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.86)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.88)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.99).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.61).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• (RX-A3020 only)

If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.127), you can turn on/off

each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

OUT1+2

HDMIOUTSel.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

HDMI OUTHDMI OUT

ON SCREEN ON SCREEN

ENTER

MUTE

VOLUME

[

]

[

]

[

]

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 61

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.105).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)

Input

Input (p.60) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.101) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.60) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

Sound Program (p.63) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 9ch Stereo 9ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.119) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.68) Off On On On

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.101) On On On On

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ON SCREEN ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 62

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the

display window on the remote control.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.137) to register it.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI or of a Yamaha product connected to the

REMOTE OUT jack. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in

“Device Control” (p.106) in the “Scene” menu.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.107) in the “Scene” menu.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SETComplete

SCENE1

Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround

Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Vol ume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

SCENE

[

]

[

]

[

]

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 63

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• MOVIE THEATER category (p.65):

Press MOVIE repeatedly.

• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.65):

Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.

Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo

playback

• CLASSICAL category (p.66):

Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.

• LIVE/CLUB category (p.66):

Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly.

• STEREO category (p.66):

Press STEREO repeatedly.

Selecting a surround decoder (p.67)

Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

Switching to the straight decode mode (p.67)

Press STRAIGHT.

Switching to the Pure Direct mode (p.68)

Press PURE DIRECT.

Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68)

Press ENHANCER.

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press

ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “Sound Program” menu (p.108).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.131).

Selecting the sound mode

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

SUR.DECODE

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

ENHANCER

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 64

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP HD/CINEMA DSP 3D)

* CINEMA DSP HD³: RX-A3020, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-A2020

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize

Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA

DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual

movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural

stereoscopic sound fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.99) in the

“Option” menu to “Off”.

• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full

effect of the stereoscopic sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further

spatial sounds). However, even when no front presence speakers are connected,

the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and

surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs when no surround

speakers are connected, the unit creates the surround sound field

using the front-side speakers.

■ Enjoying surround sound with

headphones (SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel

speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

HallinVienna

CLASSICAL

MUSIC

“CINEMA DSP !” (RX-A3020) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-A2020) lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 65

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and

emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the

reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as

providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.

The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall

effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will

not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 66

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.64) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.64) do not work when “2ch

Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.

Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a

pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the

high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial

reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself

reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Church in

Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)

of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the

outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low

ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in

the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the

concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 67

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.100) in the “Option” menu to

a setting other than “Off”.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.153).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

SW1

SL SR

CL R

STRAIGHT

bPro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

bPLIIx Movie

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

SUR.DECODE

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

SUR.DECODESUR.DECODE

STRAIGHTSTRAIGHT

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 68

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus

– Using the multi-zone function

– Output from the AV OUT jacks

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of

uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)

when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.101) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”

(default).

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.101) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PUREDIRECT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

EnhancerOn

“ENHANCER” lights up

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENHANCERENHANCER

PURE DIRECTPURE DIRECT

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 69

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ

STEP”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press FM or AM to select a band.

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• (U.S.A. model only)

You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio

reception in “Audio Mode” (p.102) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the

monaural reception mode.)

• (Except for U.S.A. model)

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.102) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

[

]

[

]

[

]

TUN./CHTUN./CH

TUNERTUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 70

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD

Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.73, p.75).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.69)

to tune into the desired radio station.

• (U.S.A. model only)

To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.71)

after tuning into the radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.73, p.75).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PresetOK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

Preset number

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

02:Empty

Preset

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

[

]

[

]

[

]

MEMORYMEMORY

PRESETPRESET

TUNERTUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 71

HD Radio™ tuning

(U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM

radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting

provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and

reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental

program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio

programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further

information on HD Radio Technology, visit

“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating

CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM

broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data

(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)

from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).

When tuning into an HD Radio station

• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If

you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down

TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.

• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.102), you can tune into the

analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.

■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program

You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD

Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).

Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio

program.

You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)

directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select

program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).

■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information

You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the item switches.

About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.

• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station

or period of time.

Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience

of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,

HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.

Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.

These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as

deep cuts into traditional genre.

Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio

stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s

FM and FM sounds like a CD.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz1

HD1/3

Relative/total program number

(when multiple programs are available)

“HD” lights up Absolute program number

(when multiple programs are available)

Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign)

Category Station name (call sign), program category

Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title

Album Station name (call sign), album title

DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit

Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz3

HD2/3

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Category

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

RhythmandBlu

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9-1

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENT

TUN./CHTUN./CH

INFOINFO

MODEMODE

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 72

■ Holding HD Radio™ information display

You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the

TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.

When the desired HD Radio information is

displayed, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”

(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.

The current information will remain displayed until

“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode

or if another input source or another radio station is selected.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

■ Operating HD Radio™ on the TV

You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on

the TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

❑ Playback screen

1 HOLD indicator

Flashes when the hold function (p.72) is enabled.

2 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program

number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program

category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 HD indicator

Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.

4 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Program (+/-)

Selects an audio program (when

multiple audio programs are

available).

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OPTIONOPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNERTUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 73

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1

(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.75).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers HD Radio

(FM/AM) stations and FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProgramType

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

CLASSICS

FM98.50MHz

Information

Frequency (always displayed)

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

INFOINFO

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 74

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.73), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 Band icon

(Except for U.K. and Europe models)

Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

TPFM101.30MHz

TrafficProgram

Finished

Traffic information station (frequency)

• (U.S.A. model only)

See “Operating HD Radio™ on the TV” (p.72) to operate the radio on the TV.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OPTIONOPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNERTUNER

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 75

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 76

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)

is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite

AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To

select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.78).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playing back iPod music

Supported iPod (as of April 2012)

• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.)

• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

• iPad2, iPad

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

USB

YPAO MIC

PHONES

PROGRAM

SILEN

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

OUT

VOL UME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 77

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.78).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.79) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

USBUSB

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 78

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.79) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

s Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

MODEMODE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 79

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order. “x”

appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order. “x”

appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”

appears in the TV screen.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

MODEMODE

OPTIONOPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 80

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage

device for more information.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC

files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,

and 48 kHz for other files.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer

of the USB storage device.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

USB

YPAO MIC

PHONES

PROGRAM

SILEN

5V 2.1A

USB

The unit (front)

USB storage device

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

USBUSB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 81

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.82) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 82

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.82) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order. “x” appears on

the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the

TV screen.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OPTIONOPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 83

You can play back music files stored on your PC or

DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router

(p.45). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)

are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,

and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing

and allow media to be shared with the device.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and

configure the media sharing settings.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

NETNET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 84

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.85) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q /w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 85

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.85) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.105).

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order. “x” appears on

the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the

TV screen.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OPTIONOPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 86

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.45). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Listening to Internet radio

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

NETNET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 87

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by

accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this

feature, you need the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create

your personal account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in

“Network” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to

stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control s Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 88

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on

the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same

router (p.45). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP

address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.132) in the “Information”

menu.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music

contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or

display the playback screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon

( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are

connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and

select the unit (network name of the unit) as the

audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and

starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

Supported iTunes/iPod (as of April 2012)

• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)

• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later

iTunes

Router

Playback starts

iPod

Starts playback

on iTunes

or iPod

The unit

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 89

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.104) in the “Input”

menu to “Off”.

• To start AirPlay playback when AirPlay from another device is ongoing, first stop

the current playback.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 90

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input

sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in

other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main

zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room

(Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3)

and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.91

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.92

TV (for digital video playback [RX-A3020 only]): p.93

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.91

❑

Enjoying videos/music using only a TV (RX-A3020 only)

Connection

TV: p.93

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• The Zone4 function is available on RX-A3020 only.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how

you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.157).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone

configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best

meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2 and/or Zone3)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Living room (main zone)

Guest room

(Zone2 or Zone3)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Video (ZONE

OUT or HDMI)

Living room (main zone)

Kitchen

(Zone2 or Zone4)

Video/audio

(HDMI)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91

Preparing the multi zone system

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The

connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used

(the unit or an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with

speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers”

(p.32).

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit

with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external

amplifier.

• (RX-A3020 only)

You cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external

amplifier for Zone2 or Zone3 depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting

(p.114) in the “Setup” menu.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers or an external amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or

come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit

or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will

appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

MI OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (

(

EXTRA SP2

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2 /

F.PRE SENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

AUDIO

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 92

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back

analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or

Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video

monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for

multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the

zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same

way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the

DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component

video cable.

• (RX-A3020 only)

On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign”

(p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor

for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) in the “Setup”

menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDI O 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP2

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(any of COMPONENT VIDEO,

VIDEO, S VIDEO)

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

Video input

(any of component video,

composite video, S-video)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 93

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to

play back videos/audio

(RX-A3020 only)

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back

videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you

can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4).

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to

connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.41).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected

to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone4.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set

“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can

enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio

Output” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.32).

TWORK

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

YPB PR YPB

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

XIAL

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUDI O 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

CENTE

SUBWOOF

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BAC

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

NTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone4

Main zone

HDMI input

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

(Example: using an AV amplifier)

Zone2 or Zone4

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the

following operations is performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 94

■ Operating the unit from another room

(remote connection)

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3

or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an

infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or

REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.136).

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using

Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit

does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

HDMI

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRI

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

PONENT VIDEO

AV 4

LTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

OUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

12V

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

Infrared

signal

receiver

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 95

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.

Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated

switches.

Press RECEIVER z.

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled

or disabled.

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding

zone indicator lights up in the front display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how

you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,

see “Multi-zone output” (p.157).

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the

main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.69)

• Playing back iPod music (p.76)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.80)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.83)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.86)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.88)

• You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For

details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on

the CD-ROM.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is

ongoing in the main zone.

RECEIVER

Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or

Zone4.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

ZONEZONE

[

]

[

]

[

]

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 96

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or

Zone4

The following functions are also available when the zone you want

to operate is enabled.

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be

operated.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB steps)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be

operated.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same

music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party

mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.

Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as

background music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode

Set” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu.

• (RX-A3020 only)

Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main

zone.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

SLEEPSLEEP

PARTYPARTY

MUTE

VOLUME

SCENE

PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 97

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–4

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name)

* (U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned

into an HD Radio station (p.71).

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.73).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

AudioDecoder

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

AV1

Information

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name)

* During simple playback of iPod:

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETU

PZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

INFOINFO

DISPLAYDISPLAY

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 98

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ToneControl

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

Adaptive DRC

(Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 99

Dialogue Adjust

(Dialog Adjust)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 100

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 100

Extended Surround

(EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources

when surround back speakers are used.

100

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 100

Subwoofer

Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 101

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 101

Hi-Res Mode

(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for

enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital

audio).

101

Video Mode

(Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

101

Video Adjustment

(Video Adjust)

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 101

Audio Select

(Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than

one audio connection is made for one input source.

101

Audio Mode

(Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM

radio reception.

102

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to

playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a

high volume.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (RX-A3020) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2020)

(p.64). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D functions with

the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).

Settings

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

102

Hold/Unhold

(Hold/Unhold)

(U.S.A. model only)

Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is

tuned into an HD Radio station.

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.79),

USB storage device (p.82), or media server (p.85).

—

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.79),

USB storage device (p.82), or media server (p.85).

—

Item Function Page

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 100

■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you

can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

0 to 3

Default

❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this

setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence

speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.64) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Default

■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

• Some early Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back

channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back

those sources.

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Ideal position

Auto (Auto)

(default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

(bPLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off (Off)

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the

signal in 5.1-channel.)

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 101

❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.68).

Settings

Default

TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this

function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio

(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.

Settings

■ Video Mode (Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video

adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment”

(p.120) in the “Setup” menu.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

1 to 6

■ Audio Select (Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for

one input source.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.

On (On) (default) Enables the high-resolution mode.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Direct (Direct)

(default)

Disables the video signal processing.

Auto (Auto) (default)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt

(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or

OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 102

■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.

• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).

Settings

• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Auto (Auto) (default)

Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the

signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.

Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.

Stereo (Stereo)

(default)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 103

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 104

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 104

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

104

Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 104

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

105

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 104

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Input sources

TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Default

USB: V-AUX

Others: Off

Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited (default)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Off Does not output video.

AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 105

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.61) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 106

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.62).

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

❑ Device Control

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to

the unit via HDMI or on a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.

(SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI

Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.158).

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 106

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

106

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 107

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 107

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1

Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this

if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.

IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 2

Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this

if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack

and “IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1” does not work properly.

IR: Yamaha CD

Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this

if a Yamaha CD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 107

❑ Detail

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with

low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and

include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.61) for the selected scene.

Input Input (p.60), Audio Select (p.101)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.60)

Mode

Sound Program (p.63), Pure Direct Mode (p.119), Enhancer (p.68),

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.101)

Sound Tone Control (p.99), Adaptive DRC (p.99)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.99), Dialogue Lift (p.100), Dialogue Level

(p.100), Subwoofer Trim (p.101), Extended Surround (p.100)

Video Video Mode (p.119), Video Adjustment (p.101)

Volume Master Volume (p.60)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.118), Delay (p.118)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.114), PEQ Select (p.117)

Check or uncheck

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 108

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (Sound Program menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 109

Sound Program menu items

• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround

decoder.

■ Settings for sound programs

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bPLIIx Movie (bPLII

Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1 ms to 49 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0ms to 250ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto (default), Off

9ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the right and left

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the front

presence speakers.

0 to 10 (default: 5)

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

front presence speakers do

not produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off (default), On

Item Function Settings

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 110

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off (default), On

Select “On” to wrap front right/left

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 7 (default: 3)

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to +3 (default: 0)

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 50

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 114

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 114

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 114

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 115

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 115

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 115

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 115

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 116

Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. 116

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 116

SWFR Layout Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. 116

Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 116

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 116

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 117

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 117

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 117

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 118

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 118

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 118

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 118

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 118

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 119

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 119

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 119

Video

Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks 119

Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 119

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 122

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 122

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 123

Network

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 123

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 124

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 124

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 124

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 125

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 125

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 125

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 125

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 126

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 126

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 126

Zone4 Set

(RX-A3020 only)

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 126

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 126

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 126

HDMI OUT2 Assign

(RX-A3020 only)

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 127

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 127

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 127

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 128

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 128

Wall Paper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 128

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 128

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 129

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 129

ECO

Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 130

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 130

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 130

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1 (default), Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to

2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic (default)

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.19).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and

Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.30).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks

(default: Zone2).

9ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and

Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks

(default: Zone3).

7ch +2ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus

Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.31).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks

(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

9ch +RP

(RX-A3020 only)

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence

channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.27).

9ch +FRONT

(RX-A3020 only)

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).

7ch +FP+RP

(RX-A3020 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and

rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).

7ch

+FRONT+1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or

Zone2) speakers (p.29).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks

(default: Zone3).

5ch

+FRONT+2ZONE

Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2

and Zone3 speakers (p.29).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks

(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

7ch BI-AMP

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers) (p.26).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

❑ Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

❑ Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

❑ Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

❑ Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

7ch BI-AMP +FP

(RX-A3020 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers) plus front presence channel expansion using an external

amplifier (p.26).

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

(RX-A3020 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion

using an external amplifier (p.27).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2 (default)

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116

❑ Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.

Settings

❑ Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or

SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

❑ SWFR Layout

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.

❑ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

• This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front”

is set to “Small”.

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,

Subwoofer 2

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Default

3.00 m (10.0 ft)

Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Use Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected.

None (default) Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Use

Normal

(default)

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The

subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The

subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will

produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency

components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and

“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right

sides of the room.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear

sides of the room.

Monaural x2

(default)

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel

low-frequency components.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,

Subwoofer 2

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting while viewing the front display

a Press LEVEL.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.

c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.50). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.50) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset band and the cursor keys (q/w) to

adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

❑ Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, AUDIO 1–4

Settings

❑ Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV

connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

❑ Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Default

0 ms

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment

and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto (default)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.68).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Analog to Analog Conversion

Enables/disables the video conversion (p.156) between the analog video jacks

(COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO).

Settings

• This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2

Assign” (RX-A3020 only) (p.127) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

• Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.156).

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video

adjustments).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

Off (default)

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5

dB increments).

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Auto (default)

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from

the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with

the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,

the wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On (default)

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.

On (default)

Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.

Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks

only.

Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120

❑ Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• Conversion into 4K signals is available only when both “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) and “HDMI OUT2

Assign” (RX-A3020 only) (p.127) are set to “Main” (default).

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.134) in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on

your TV normally.)

❑ Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or

2160p (4K) signals.

❑ Adjustment

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Contrast Enhancement

Selects whether to automatically enhance the video contrast.

Settings

Resolution Enhancement

Selects whether to enhance the video resolution.

Settings

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

Smart Zoom

Adjusts 4:3 video signals to fit a 16:9 TV. (The edges of video images

may be distorted.)

Off (default) Does not enhance the video contrast.

Auto Enhances the video contrast automatically.

Off (default) Does not enhance the video resolution.

Auto Enhances the video resolution automatically.

Manual

(RX-A3020 only)

Adjusts the video resolution settings manually.

Configure the settings in “Detail Enhancement” and “Edge

Enhancement”.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121

Detail Enhancement

(RX-A3020 only)

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details manually when “Resolution

Enhancement” is set to “Manual”.

Setting range

0 to 50

Default

Edge Enhancement

(RX-A3020 only)

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges manually when “Resolution

Enhancement” is set to “Manual”.

Setting range

0 to 50

Default

Noise Reduction (NR)

Selects whether to use the noise reduction functions.

Settings

Mosquito NR

(RX-A3020 only)

Selects the effect of the mosquito noise reduction when “Noise Reduction (NR)” is set to

“Manual”. Mosquito noise is a distortion that comes out at the video edges.

Settings

Block NR

(RX-A3020 only)

Selects the effect of the block noise reduction when “Noise Reduction (NR)” is set to

“Manual”. Block noise is a block-shaped distortion that often appears during playback

of low bit-rate videos.

Settings

Temporal NR

(RX-A3020 only)

Selects the effect of the temporal noise (film-grain noise and random noise of analog

video signals) reduction when “Noise Reduction (NR)” is set to “Manual”.

Settings

Brightness

Adjusts the video brightness.

Setting range

-100 to +100

Default

Contrast

Adjusts the video contrast.

Setting range

-100 to +100

Default

Saturation

Adjusts the video saturation.

Setting range

-100 to +100

Default

Off (default) Does not use the noise reduction functions.

Auto Reduces the video noises automatically.

Manual

(RX-A3020 only)

Selects noise types and noise reduction effects manually.

Configure the settings in “Mosquito NR”, “Block NR” and “Temporal

NR”.

Off (default) Does not use the mosquito noise reduction.

Low, Medium, High Reduces mosquito noises according to the selected effect level.

Off (default) Does not use the block noise reduction.

Low, Medium, High Reduces block noises according to the selected effect level.

Off (default) Does not use the temporal noise reduction.

Low, Medium, High Reduces temporal noises according to the selected effect level.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.158).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.158) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

❑ TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–4

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting

an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

❑ ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.35) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to

“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

❑ Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit

when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• (RX-A3020 only)

The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) is set to “Main”.

❑ Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to

the unit.

Settings

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby

Sync”.

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto (default)

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123

❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection

keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby

mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

❑ DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

❑ Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

❑ MAC Address 1–10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

❑ Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the

volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.

Settings

• This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.114).

❑ Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

❑ Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Off (default)

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 126

❑ Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Settings

❑ Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone

Set” (p.125).

■ Zone4 Set

(RX-A3020 only)

Configures the Zone4 settings.

❑ Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in

“Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.126).

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone

Set” (p.125).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,

S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2, Zone3

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 127

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

(RX-A3020 only)

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2, Zone4

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.157).

❑ Audio Output

Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2

Assign” is set to “Zone2”.

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.96) for each zone.

Choice

Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4 (RX-A3020 only)

Settings

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.

On Enables the audio output.

Off (default) Disables the audio output (video output only).

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable (default)

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 128

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

❑ Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.130) is set to “On”.

❑ Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

❑ Wall Paper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

❑ Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching

when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Picture 1 (default),

Picture 2, Picture 3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Power (default)

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source”.

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High (default)

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 129

❑ Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

Zone3

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with power status of Zone3.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.

Zone4

(RX-A3020 only)

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with power status of Zone4.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.

All (default)

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of any zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 130

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Down

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for

the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Off (default) Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English (default) English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 131

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 132

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware” (p.144).

■ Zone

Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 (RX-A3020 only).

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.124)

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.133)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.134)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.133)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.134)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 133

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.

Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 133

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 133

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 133

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

134

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 134

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 134

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

135

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 135

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 135

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 135

6 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN (default)

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ON

REMOTESENSOR

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ID1

REMOTECONAMP

PRESET

5020

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 134

Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display

window.

If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• The registered remote control codes (p.136) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting

(TUNER FRQ STEP)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.120) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz

steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9 (default)

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

NTSC

TVFORMAT

YES (default)

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

YES

MONITORCHECK

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 135

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is

connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,

refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.144).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.132) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

USB

FIRMUPDATE

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

x.xx

VERSION

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 136

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to

sequentially operate multiple functions at once.

Press SETUP.

• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control

automatically exits from the setup menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and

press ENTER.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

Registering remote control codes

■

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection

keys (p.137). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.

If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and

press ENTER.

Press TV z and press ENTER.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

Item Function Page

LEARN

Assigns a function to each key by learning the code

from other remote controls.

138

PRESET

Registers the remote control code for external

devices.

136

RENAME

Edits the device names or scene names displayed

on the remote control’s display window.

139

MACRO

Programs macro operations (sequence of control

commands).

140

CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 142

ERASE Erases a function assigned to each key by learning. 143

EX-IR

Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the

authorized custom installers only.

—

SETUP

PRESET

Item name

PRESET

----

“----” (empty) or code currently registered

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 137

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the

4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,

“OK” appears in the display window.

If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from

Step 3.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

❑ TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

■ Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B]

or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching

the input source after pressing the key.

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find the remote control code for your playback

device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and

press ENTER.

Press a corresponding input selection key and

press ENTER.

For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for

the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the

4-digit remote control and press ENTER.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,

“OK” appears in the display window.

If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from

Step 3.

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z Turns on/off the TV.

PRESET

5098

Code currently registered

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

SETUP

ENTER

Input selection keys

TV operation keys

Numeric keys

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 138

To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4

and 5.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Configuring scene assignments” (p.62).

❑ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in

orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For

example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when

SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when

SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

Programming from other remote controls

(learning)

The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals

from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control

operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your

playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work

after you register the remote control code, use the learning function

to assign a function to each key.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and

press ENTER.

Press one of the following keys depending on the

type of your device.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is

connected).

For TV: press TV z.

SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

MODE Switches between modes.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected

song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.137).

LEARN

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

SETUP

TV z

MODEMODE

DISPLAYDISPLAY

ENTER

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

TV operation keys

Numeric keys

External device

operation keys

External device

operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 139

Press ENTER.

Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls

at each other.

Perform the following steps (a and b) within

10 seconds.

a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to

assign a function.

For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,

DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys

For TV: TV operation keys

b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is

learned until “OK” appears in the display window.

If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.

Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are

learned.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be

decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display

window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the

new functions.

Editing device names

You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the

remote control’s display window.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and

press ENTER.

Press one of the following keys to select a device or

a scene.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).

For TV: press TV z.

For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.

For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-AU X

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

Remote control of external device

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart

Note

• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external

receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or

numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If

you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following

steps.

a Press SETUP.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.

d Press RECEIVER z.

e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.

f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

RENAME

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

SETUP

TV z

MODEMODE

DISPLAYDISPLAY

ENTER

SCENE

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

TV operation keys

Numeric keys

External device

operation keys

External device

operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 140

• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press

ZONE to select a zone.

Press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to rename.

To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).

To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,

symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).

Press ENTER to register the new name.

Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”

appears in the display window.

To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat

Steps 3 to 6.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

Operating multiple functions at once

(macro)

The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple

functions at once.

For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the

CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and

start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key

operation.

■ Enabling the macro operations

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press

ENTER.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.

BD/DVD

MACRO

ON

RECEIVER

“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

SETUP

ZONE

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 141

By default, the following macro operations are available after

pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are

enabled.

■ Programming macro operations

You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each

macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro

operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out

sequentially according to the programmed remote control

commands.

• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control

codes (p.136) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.138).

• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume

adjustment) in macro operations.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and

press ENTER.

Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or

input selection key) to which macro operations are

assigned and press ENTER.

“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.

Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to

include in the macro operations in sequence.

To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,

press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

(Example)

Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as

the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to

“AV1” and dturning on the TV

a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.

b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.

c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select

“AV1” and press SOURCE z.

d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select

“TV” and press TV z.

To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”

appears on the window display.

If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and

the setting is confirmed automatically.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

Macro operation key

Macro operations

1st command 2nd commend

RECEIVER z Turns on the unit. (unregistered)

Input selection keys Turns on the unit.

Selects the

corresponding input

source. (unregistered

for the [A], [B] and [C]

keys)

MACRO

EDIT

MACRO1

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Input selection keys

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 142

Resetting the remote control configurations

■ Clearing the remote control configurations

You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of

settings or clear all the remote control configurations.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to

be cleared and press ENTER.

“ALL” appears in the display window.

To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,

proceed to Step 5.

To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.

• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.

You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.

Press a key to which the selected process is

applied.

When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the

input selection key or TV

When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection

key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.

When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation

key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).

Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the

window display.

If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat

from Step 2.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

LEARN

Clears the functions learned from other remote

controls.

PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings.

RENAME Restores the default device name settings.

MACRO Clears the macro operation settings.

RESET

Clears all remote control configurations and

restores default settings.

CLEAR

PRESET

ALL

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

SCENE

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 143

■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by

learning

You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and

restore the default key assignments.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and

press ENTER.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV z.

Press ENTER.

Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on

the window display.

If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat

from Step 2.

Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key

assignments are erased.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

ERASE

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMO

INFO AM

PAR T

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

UN.

SOU

RECEIVE

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware En 144

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.135).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.132). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPU

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

P MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

RECEIVE

V-

AUX

MUL

B NE

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

ENTER

Cursor keys

APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 145

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.50). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.114).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.118). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 or Zone3 (p.125).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.119). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.125).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.158). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.128) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.129).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.133).

Frequently asked questions

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 146

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power and system

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.23).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu

to “Off” (p.130).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.133).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.23).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.130).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 147

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.118).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.117).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.115).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.117).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.100).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.116).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”

menu to “Use” (p.116).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.122).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 148

Video

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.122).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.122). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the

unit with HDMI).

(RX-A3020 only)

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is

disabled.

Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.127).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.130).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

(RX-A3020 only)

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or

Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.93).

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.134).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.131). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.159).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video is interrupted.

(RX-A3020 only)

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or

Zone4, HDMI video output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.93).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 149

FM/AM radio

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

(U.S.A. model only)

Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.102).

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.102).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.69).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.69).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.

model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.70).

The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.

(U.S.A. model only)

The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.102).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 150

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.123). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.123).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.83).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.83).

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 151

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key

lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.133).

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices

(the key lights up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.136). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The remote control does not learn new functions.

The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external

device are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.138).

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not

compatible with the remote control.

Learning is impossible in this case.

Memory capacity is full.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions

(p.143).

APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 152

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.83).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.76).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.45).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.133).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.133).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.83). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 153

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 154

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“

http://www.hdmi.org/”.

S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C

signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color

reproduction than the composite video signal system.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 155

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

CINEMA DSP HD³

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 156

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line)

is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”

(p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

S VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

SVIDEO

out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmmm

1080i mmmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO

480i/576i mmmmmmm ,,

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmmm m

1080i mmmmm m

1080p m

S VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmm, m,

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm, ,m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

S VIDEO outS VIDEO in

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 157

Multi-zone output

■ RX-A3020

❑ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)

*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”

*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input

source selected in the main zone is selected)

*4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the

main zone is selected)

*5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

❑ Video output

m: Available

*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”

*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”

*8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

■ RX-A2020

❑ Audio output

m: Available

* To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2 or Zone3, connect the device to the AUDIO jacks of

the unit with a stereo pin cable.

❑ Video output

m: Available

* To watch videos in Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

or “Zone3”.

Using the unit's

internal amplifier (p.32)

Using an external amplifier (p.91)

Out

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*3) m (*4)

Digital audio

(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*5) m (*5) m (*5)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

mmmmm

USB (including iPod) mmmmm

Network sources mmmmm

TUNER mmmmm

Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)

jack (*7)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO

Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2 Zone4

HDMI video mm

Component video m

S-video m

Composite video m

On-screen display

(browse/playback)

m (*8) m (*8) m (*8) m

Using the unit's internal amplifier

(

p.32

)

Using an external amplifier

(p.91)

Out

EXTRA SP 1–2

jacks

ZONE OUT

jacks

Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Zone3

Digital audio (HDMI)

Digital audio

(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

mmmm

USB (including iPod) mmmm

Network sources mmmm

TUNER mmmm

Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO

Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2/3

HDMI video

Component video m

S-video m

Composite video m

On-screen display

(browse/playback)

mmm

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 158

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.35) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.41).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.61)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.137)

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.122) in the “Setup”

menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and

“Standby Sync”).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 159

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 160

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory

standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign

Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Rovi™

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi

Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by

Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Trademarks

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 161

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)

Component x 4 (AV 1–4)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)

•Other

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND

L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R

, EXTRA SP 2

L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE]

- Subwoofer Out x 2

(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)

- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)

[RX-A3020]

- Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R

, R.PRESENCE L/R

)

*3 Note: barter to ZONE2

*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

[RX-A2020]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

• Digital Audio

Optical x 1 (AV OUT)

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

- Component x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2

)

*5 [RX-A3020 only] barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)

Other jacks

• REMOTE IN x 2

• REMOTE OUT x 2

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

• DC OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,

ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

-DSD 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

Specifications

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 162

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

[RX-A3020]

(20 Hz to 20 k Hz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R ..........................................................150 W+150 W

Center .......................................................................... 150 W

Surround L/R....................................................150 W+150 W

Surround Back L/R ..........................................150 W+150 W

Front Presence L/R ..........................................150 W+150 W

(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R ..........................................................165 W+165 W

Center .......................................................................... 165 W

Surround L/R....................................................165 W+165 W

Surround Back L/R ..........................................165 W+165 W

Front Presence L/R ..........................................165 W+165 W

[RX-A2020]

(20 Hz to 20 k Hz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R.......................................................... 140 W+140 W

Center...........................................................................140 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W

(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R.......................................................... 155 W+155 W

Center...........................................................................155 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-A3020]

(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R..................................................................185 W/ch

Center......................................................................185 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................185 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................185 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................185 W/ch

(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] .......................230 W/ch

[RX-A2020]

(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R..................................................................175 W/ch

Center......................................................................175 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................175 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................175 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................175 W/ch

(1 k Hz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] .......................220 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8

)

[China, Korea, Asia and General models]

[RX-A3020]

Front L/R..................................................................230 W/ch

Center .....................................................................230 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................230 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................230 W/ch

[RX-A2020]

Front L/R..................................................................220 W/ch

Center .....................................................................220 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................220 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................220 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................220 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[RX-A3020]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................175/220/295/410 W

[RX-A2020]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)................................165/210/285/405 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω..............................................150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ...................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...............................60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD).........................2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100 Ω

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 163

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz)..........................................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AV OUT..............................................0.02% or less

MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 Ω)

.............................................................................0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...86 dB or more

[Other models]....................................................81 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)

..........................................................................100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ... 60 dB/55 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

Zone2/Zone3

Bass Boost/Cut.............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC

[Other models] ................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ..................... NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite ..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]

.....................................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

C (PAL) [Other models]....................................0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Pb/Pr.................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................72 dB/70 dB

HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.3%/0.5%

HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03%

• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models]......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models].........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model]............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model]............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model].................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model].....................................................490 W/620 VA

[Canada model]..................................................400 W/510 VA

[Korea model] .................................................................390 W

[Other models]................................................................490 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ........... 0.3 W (Typical)

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 5.0 W (Typical)

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)

.......................................................................... 4.2 W (Typical)

Network Standby On......................................... 2.2 W (Typical)

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models]...........................................1210 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

......................435 x 192 x 467 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-3/8”)

•Weight

[RX-A3020]

[China, U.K. and Europe models]..............19.9 kg (43.9 lbs)

[Other models] ........................................... 18.2 kg (40.1 lbs)

[RX-A2020].................................................... 17.1 kg (37.7 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 164

Symbols

Lock icon (o) .........................................129

bPLII Game (surround decoder) ............67

bPLII Movie (surround decoder) ............67

bPLII Music (surround decoder) ............67

bPLIIx Game (surround decoder) ..........67

bPLIIx Movie (Extended Surround) ......100

bPLIIx Movie (surround decoder) ..........67

bPLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ......100

bPLIIx Music (surround decoder) ..........67

bPLIIxMo (Extended Surround) ............100

bPLIIxMu (Extended Surround) ............100

bPro Logic (surround decoder) ..............67

Numerics

2.1-channel system

(speaker configuration) ...........................20

2ch Stereo (sound program) .....................66

4K signal (video signal resolution) ..........159

5.1-channel system

(speaker configuration) ...........................20

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ........114

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

(speaker configuration) ...........................29

7.1-channel system

(speaker configuration) ...........................20

7ch +1ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ........114

7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) .......30

7ch +2ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ........114

7ch +2ZONE (speaker configuration) .......31

7ch +FP+RP

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114

7ch +FP+RP (speaker configuration) ...... 28

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

(speaker configuration) .......................... 29

7ch BI-AMP

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114

7ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) ........ 26

7ch BI-AMP +FP

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 115

7ch BI-AMP +FP

(speaker configuration) .......................... 26

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 115

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

(speaker configuration) .......................... 27

9.2+2-channel system

(speaker configuration) .......................... 19

9.2-channel system

(speaker configuration) .......................... 19

9ch +1ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114

9ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) ...... 30

9ch +FRONT

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114

9ch +FRONT (speaker configuration) ...... 28

9ch +RP

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) ....... 114

9ch +RP (speaker configuration) ............. 27

9ch Stereo (sound program) .................... 66

Access control (network device) ............ 124

Action Game (sound program) ................ 65

Adaptive DRC (Option menu) .................. 99

Adaptive DSP Level

(Sound, Setup menu) ........................... 119

Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) ........ 118

Adjustment

(Video Mode, Setup menu) .................. 120

ADVANCED SETUP menu ...................... 132

ADVANCED SETUP menu items ............ 133

Adventure (sound program) ..................... 65

AirPlay ...................................................... 88

AM antenna .............................................. 44

Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) .......... 122

Analog to Analog Conversion

(Video, Setup menu) ............................ 119

Angle measurement (YPAO) .............. 53, 55

Apple Composite AV Cable ..................... 76

ARC (Audio Return Channel) ................... 35

ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) ......... 122

Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) ........ 120

Audio Decoder

(front display information) ...................... 97

Audio device connection ......................... 43

Audio file format (PC/NAS) ....................... 83

Audio file format (USB storage device) .... 80

AUDIO jack .............................................. 34

Audio Mode (Option menu) .................... 102

Audio Output

(HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) ...... 127

Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) ........ 122

Audio program (HD Radio) ...................... 71

Audio Return Channel (ARC) ................... 35

Index

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 165

Audio Select (Option menu) ....................101

Audio Signal (Information menu) ............131

Auto Power Down (ECO, Setup menu) ...130

Auto/Manual Select

(Lipsync, Setup menu) ..........................118

Automatic station preset (FM radio) ..........75

Automatic station preset (HD Radio) ........73

AV OUT jacks ............................................46

Backup/recovery of the settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135

Banana plug ..............................................23

Battery .........................................................5

Bitrate

(Audio Signal, Information menu) .........131

Bitstream .................................................159

Block NR (Adjustment, Setup menu) ......121

Brightness (Adjustment, Setup menu) ....121

Cartridge ...................................................43

Cellar Club (sound program) ....................66

Center (Configuration, Setup menu) .......115

Center Image (Sound Program menu) ....110

Center Width (Sound Program menu) .....110

Chamber (sound program) .......................66

Channel

(Audio Signal, Information menu) .........131

Church in Freiburg (sound program) ........66

Church in Royaumont (sound program) ...66

CINEMA DSP 3D .......................................64

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) ....99

CINEMA DSP HD³ .....................................64

CLASSICAL

(sound program subcategory) ................66

Clearing (remote control) ........................142

Clock Time (Radio Data System) ............. 73

COAXIAL jack .......................................... 34

Component video cable ........................... 34

COMPONENT VIDEO jack ....................... 34

Compressed Music Enhancer .................. 68

Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) .... 115

Contrast (Adjustment, Setup menu) ....... 121

Contrast Enhancement

(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 120

Crossover frequency setting

(subwoofer) ............................................ 50

DC OUT jack ............................................ 13

Decode Type (Sound Program menu) ... 109

Decoder Mode (Input menu) .................. 104

Default Gateway ..................................... 123

Default Gateway

(Network, Information menu) ................ 132

Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) ..... 118

Detail (Scene menu) .............................. 107

Detail Enhancement

(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121

Device Control (Scene menu) ................ 106

DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) ........... 123

Dialogue

(Audio Signal, Information menu) ........ 131

Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) .............. 100

Dialogue Level (Option menu) ............... 100

Dialogue Lift (Option menu) ................... 100

Dialogue normalization level .................. 131

Digital coaxial cable ................................. 34

Digital Media Controller (DMC) .............. 105

Digital optical cable ................................. 34

Dimension (Sound Program menu) ........ 110

Dimmer (Front Display)

(Display Set, Setup menu) ................... 128

Direct (Sound Program menu) ............... 109

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) ................... 153

DISPLAY key ............................................ 97

Display Set (Function, Setup menu) ....... 128

Display window (remote control) .............. 15

Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) ........... 116

DMC (Digital Media Controller) .............. 105

DMC Control (Input menu) ..................... 105

DNS Server ............................................. 123

DNS Server

(Network, Information menu) ................ 132

Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ... 100

Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) ....... 67

Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) .... 67

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

(surround decoder) ................................ 67

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

(Extended Surround) ............................ 100

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

(Extended Surround) ............................ 100

Drama (sound program) .......................... 65

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) ................... 153

DSP Level (Sound Program menu) ........ 109

DSP Program

(front display information) ...................... 97

DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) ................ 67

DTS-ES (Extended Surround) ................ 100

Dynamic Range

(Sound, Setup menu) ........................... 118

ECO (Setup menu) ................................. 130

ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) ............. 130

Edge Enhancement

(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121

Enhancer (Option menu) ........................ 101

ENHANCER (sound mode) ...................... 68

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 166

ENTERTAINMENT

(sound program subcategory) ................65

Erasing (remote control) .........................143

Error message (YPAO) ..............................58

EX/ES (Extended Surround) ....................100

Extended Surround (Option menu) .........100

External device control

(remote control) .....................................136

External device operation keys

(remote control) .......................................15

External power amplifier connection .........33

Extra Bass

(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116

Filter

(MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) .......124

FIRM UPDATE

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135

Firmware update .....................................144

Firmware update

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135

Firmware Version

(System, Information menu) ..................132

Firmware version check

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135

FM antenna ...............................................44

FM Mode (Option menu) .........................102

FM/AM antenna connection ......................44

Format

(Audio Signal, Information menu) .........131

Frequency step setting

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ....................69

Front (Configuration, Setup menu) ..........115

Front / Rear Balance

(Sound Program menu) .........................109

Front display

(part names and functions) .................... 12

Front display information .......................... 97

Front panel (part names and functions) ... 10

Front panel door (front panel) .................. 10

Front Presence

(Configuration, Setup menu) ................ 116

Function (Setup menu) ........................... 127

GND terminal (turntable connection) ....... 43

Ground lead (turntable connection) ......... 43

Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) ........ 66

Hall in Munich (sound program) .............. 66

Hall in Vienna (sound program) ............... 66

HD Radio audio program selection .......... 71

HD Radio information ............................... 71

HDMI (Setup menu) ............................... 122

HDMI cable .............................................. 34

HDMI Control ......................................... 158

HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) ........ 122

HDMI jack ................................................ 34

HDMI Monitor (Information menu) .......... 131

HDMI OUT1

(Audio Output, Setup menu) ................ 123

HDMI OUT2

(Audio Output, Setup menu) ................ 123

HDMI OUT2 Assign

(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..................... 127

HDMI output selection ............................. 60

Height Balance

(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109

High definition audio .............................. 159

High speed HDMI cable .......................... 34

Hi-Res Mode (Option menu) .................. 101

Hold (HD Radio information) .................... 72

Hold/Unhold (Option menu) ..................... 72

INFO key .................................................. 97

Information display (front display) ............ 12

Information menu ................................... 131

Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) ...... 109

Initial setting restoration

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 135

Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) ....... 119

Initial Volume

(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .... 125

INITIALIZE

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 135

Input Assignment

(Function, Setup menu) ........................ 127

Input jack assignment ............................ 127

Input menu ............................................. 103

Input menu items .................................... 103

Input selection keys (remote control) ....... 15

Input Trim (Option menu) ....................... 100

Internet radio ............................................ 86

IP Address .............................................. 123

IP Address

(Network, Information menu) ................ 132

IP Address (Network, Setup menu) ........ 123

iPad .......................................................... 76

iPhone ...................................................... 76

iPod .......................................................... 76

iPod connection ....................................... 76

iTunes ....................................................... 88

Language (Setup menu) ........................ 130

Learning (remote control) ....................... 138

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 167

Left / Right Balance

(Sound Program menu) .........................109

Level (Sound Program menu) .................109

Level (Speaker, Setup menu) .................117

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) ..................154

LIGHT key .................................................15

Lipsync ....................................................154

Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) ................118

LIVE/CLUB

(sound program subcategory) ................66

Liveness (Sound Program menu) ...........109

Load (Scene menu) ................................106

Low Frequency Effects (LFE) ..................154

MAC Address

(MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) .......124

MAC Address

(Network, Information menu) .................132

MAC Address Filter

(Network, Setup menu) .........................124

Macro (remote control) ...........................140

Main Zone Set

(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......................125

Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) ....114

Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) ........70

Mass storage class device .......................80

Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) .........118

Max Volume

(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .....125

Measurement result (YPAO) .....................56

Media sharing setup .................................83

Memory Guard

(Function, Setup menu) .........................129

Menu language selection ..........................49

Menu operation keys (front panel) ............11

Menu operation keys (remote control) ......15

Microphone base ............................... 53, 55

Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) ... 109

Monaural reception mode (FM radio) ...... 69

MONITOR CHECK

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134

Monitor check

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134

Monitor Out Assign

(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..................... 126

Mono

(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .... 126

Mono Movie (sound program) .................. 65

Mosquito NR

(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121

MOVIE (sound program category) ........... 65

MOVIE THEATER

(sound program subcategory) ............... 65

MULTI CH INPUT jacks ............................ 46

Multi measurement (YPAO) ...................... 54

Multi Zone (Setup menu) ........................ 125

Multi-zone ................................................. 90

Multi-zone output ................................... 157

MUSIC (sound program category) ........... 66

Music Video (sound program) ................. 65

MUTE key ................................................. 15

Muting ...................................................... 60

NAS (Network Attached Storage) ............ 45

NAS connection ....................................... 45

Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) .......... 67

Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) ............. 67

Network (Information menu) ................... 132

Network (Setup menu) ........................... 123

Network Attached Storage (NAS) ............ 45

Network connection ................................. 45

Network Name

(Network, Information menu) ................ 132

Network Name

(Network, Setup menu) ........................ 124

Network Standby

(Network, Setup menu) ........................ 124

Noise Reduction

(NR) (Adjustment, Setup menu) ........... 121

Numeric keys (remote control) ................. 16

ON SCREEN key ...................................... 15

On-screen menu ...................................... 15

OPTICAL jack ........................................... 34

OPTION key ............................................. 98

Option menu ............................................. 98

Option menu items ................................... 98

Panorama (Sound Program menu) ........ 110

Parametric EQ

(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 117

PARTY key ................................................ 96

Party mode ............................................... 96

Party Mode Set

(Multi Zone, Setup menu) ..................... 127

PC connection .......................................... 45

PHONES jack ........................................... 11

PHONO jack (turntable connection) ........ 43

Playback (iPod) ........................................ 77

Playback (NAS) ........................................ 83

Playback (PC) .......................................... 83

Playback (USB storage device) ............... 80

Power Amp Assign

(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 114

Power cable connection ........................... 48

PRE OUT jacks ......................................... 33

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 168

Program Service (Radio Data System) .....73

Program Type (Radio Data System) .........73

Pure Direct ................................................68

PURE DIRECT (sound mode) ...................68

Pure Direct Mode

(Sound, Setup menu) ............................119

Radio Data System (FM radio) ..................73

Radio Data System information .................73

Radio Text (Radio Data System) ...............73

Rear panel (part names and functions) ....13

Rear Presence

(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116

Recital/Opera (sound program) ................65

Recording device connection ...................46

RECOV./BACKUP

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................135

REMOTE CON AMP

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................133

Remote connection ...................................47

Remote control

(part names and functions) .....................15

Remote control code registration

(playback device) .................................137

Remote control code registration (TV) ....136

Remote control ID setting

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................133

Remote control ID setting

(remote control) .....................................133

Remote control sensor ................................5

Remote control sensor setting

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ..................133

Remote control signal transmitter

(remote control) .......................................15

Remote ID

(System, Information menu) ..................132

REMOTE IN jacks ..................................... 94

REMOTE OUT jacks ................................. 47

REMOTE SENSOR

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 133

Rename

(device name on the remote control) ... 139

Rename (input source name) ................ 104

Rename (network name) ........................ 124

Rename (scene name) ........................... 107

Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) ......... 104

Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) ....... 107

Repeat (iPod, Option menu) .................... 79

Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) ............... 85

Repeat

(USB storage device, Option menu) ...... 82

Reset (remote control) ........................... 142

Reset (Scene menu) .............................. 107

Resolution

(Video Mode, Setup menu) .................. 120

Resolution Enhancement

(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 120

Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) ... 109

Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) .... 109

Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) .... 109

Roleplaying Game (sound program) ....... 65

Room Size (Sound Program menu) ........ 109

Router connection .................................... 45

S VIDEO jack ............................................ 34

Sampling

(Audio Signal, Information menu) ........ 131

Saturation (Adjustment, Setup menu) .... 121

Save (Scene menu) ................................ 106

Scene configuration ................................. 62

SCENE function ........................................ 61

SCENE key ............................................... 61

SCENE link playback ............................... 47

Scene menu ........................................... 105

Scene menu items .................................. 106

Sci-Fi (sound program) ............................ 65

Setting Data Copy

(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 114

Setting Pattern

(Speaker, Setup menu) ........................ 114

Setup menu ............................................ 111

Setup menu items .................................. 112

Short Message

(Display Set, Setup menu) ................... 128

Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) ..................... 79

Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) ............... 85

Shuffle

(USB storage device, Option menu) ...... 82

SILENT CINEMA ....................................... 64

Simple play (iPod) .................................... 78

Single measurement (YPAO) ................... 52

SLEEP key ................................................ 16

Sleep timer ............................................... 16

Sound (Setup menu) .............................. 118

Sound field effect ..................................... 64

Sound mode selection ............................. 63

Sound program ........................................ 64

Sound program category ......................... 64

Sound Program menu ............................ 108

Sound Program menu items ................... 109

Speaker (Setup menu) ........................... 114

Speaker connection ................................. 22

Speaker connection (bi-amp) .................. 32

Speaker connection (Zone2/Zone3) ........ 32

SPEAKER IMP.

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 133

Speaker Impedance

(System, Information menu) ................. 132

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 169

Speaker impedance setting

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ....................21

Speaker indicator (front display) ...............12

Spectacle (sound program) ......................65

Sports (sound program) ............................65

Standard (sound program) .......................65

Standby indicator (front panel) .................10

Standby Sync

(HDMI Control, Setup menu) .................122

Standby Through

(HDMI, Setup menu) .............................123

STEREO (sound program subcategory) ...66

Stereo pin cable ........................................34

Stereo reception mode (FM radio) ............69

STP network cable ....................................45

STRAIGHT (sound mode) .........................67

Straight decode ........................................67

Subnet Mask ...........................................123

Subnet Mask

(Network, Information menu) .................132

Subwoofer 1

(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116

Subwoofer 2

(Configuration, Setup menu) .................116

Subwoofer connection ..............................23

Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) ...............101

SUR.DECODE (sound mode) ...................67

Surround (Configuration, Setup menu) ...115

Surround Back

(Configuration, Setup menu) .................115

Surround Back Initial Delay

(Sound Program menu) .........................109

Surround Back Liveness

(Sound Program menu) .........................109

Surround Back Room Size

(Sound Program menu) .........................109

Surround decoder .................................... 67

Surround Initial Delay

(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109

Surround Liveness

(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109

Surround Room Size

(Sound Program menu) ........................ 109

S-video cable ........................................... 34

SWFR Layout

(Configuration, Setup menu) ................ 116

System (Information menu) .................... 132

System ID

(System, Information menu) ................. 132

Target Zone

(Trigger Output, Setup menu) .............. 129

Temporal NR

(Adjustment, Setup menu) ................... 121

Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) ......... 117

The Bottom Line (sound program) ........... 66

The Roxy Theatre (sound program) ......... 66

Tone Control (Option menu) .................... 99

Traffic information .................................... 74

Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 74

Trigger function ........................................ 47

Trigger Mode

(Trigger Output, Setup menu) .............. 128

TRIGGER OUT jacks ................................ 47

Trigger Output1

(Function, Setup menu) ........................ 128

Trigger Output2

(Function, Setup menu) ........................ 128

TUNER FRQ STEP

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134

Tuner Frq. Step

(System, Information menu) ................. 132

Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 69

Tuning (HD Radio) ................................... 71

Turntable .................................................. 43

TV Audio Input

(HDMI Control, Setup menu) ................ 122

TV connection .......................................... 35

TV FORMAT

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134

TV Format

(System, Information menu) ................. 132

TV operation keys (remote control) .......... 15

USB jack ................................................... 11

USB storage device connection .............. 80

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) ... 135

Video (Setup menu) ............................... 119

Video Adjustment (Option menu) ........... 101

VIDEO AUX jacks ..................................... 44

Video device connection .......................... 41

VIDEO jack ............................................... 34

Video Mode (Option menu) .................... 101

Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) .......... 119

Video Out (Input menu) .......................... 104

Video pin cable ........................................ 34

Video Signal (Information menu) ............ 131

Video signal type setting

(ADVANCED SETUP menu) ................. 134

Village Vanguard (sound program) .......... 66

Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 64

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) ............... 64

VOLTAGE SELECTOR .............................. 48

Volume

(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .... 125

Volume Interlock (Input menu) ............... 104

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 170

Volume Trim (Option menu) ....................100

VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) ................64

Wall Paper (Display Set, Setup menu) ....128

Warehouse Loft (sound program) .............66

Warning message (YPAO) ........................59

Windows Media Player ..............................83

Yamaha Parametric room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) .....................50

YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room

Acoustic Optimizer) ................................50

YPAO MIC jack .........................................50

YPAO microphone ....................................50

Zone (Information menu) .........................132

Zone Rename

(Main Zone Set, Setup menu) ...............125

Zone Rename

(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .....126

Zone Rename

(Zone4 Set, Setup menu) ......................126

Zone Scene Rename

(Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set, Setup menu) .....126

Zone Scene Rename

(Zone4 Set, Setup menu) ......................126

Zone2 ........................................................90

Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......125

Zone3 ........................................................90

Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......125

Zone4 ........................................................90

Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) ......126

Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A2020 Manual de usuario

Artículos relacionados